Fiat - 500L - Brochure - 2015 - 2015

2015 OWNER’S MANUAL 500L VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing & Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by Chrysler Group LLC. Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are maintaining its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FIAT This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisGroup Automobiles customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front floor pan under the passenger seat, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .20 ▫ Request For Additional Remote Controls . . . . . .20 ▫ Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open . . .24 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) . . . . .24 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 ▫ To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .82 Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ▫ Liftgate Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .31 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. key simply push the mechanical key release button. Ignition Switch A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The ignition switch can be turned to three different positions: • STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system, etc.) can operate; NOTE: In vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions, the transmission must be in PARK before the key can be removed. Mechanical Key Release Button 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • AVV: engine start-up; • MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled. The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the engine does not start, before the starting operation can be repeated. 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key. If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a SENTRY KEY® problem with the electronics. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauCAUTION! thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unator unlocked. tended. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not comelectronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized patible with some aftermarket remote starting sysvehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are protems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate starting problems and loss of security protection. the vehicle. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Key-In-Ignition Reminder THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the user’s authority to operate the equipment. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauSystem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an thorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is authorized dealer. armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the General Information Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following auThe Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle subject to the following conditions: Security Light on the instrument panel will flash. • This device may not cause harmful interference. To Arm The System Replacement Keys • This device must accept any interference that may be 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out received, including interference that may cause undeof the vehicle. sired operation. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter time even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly and close all doors. closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact your authorized dealer. 3. The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will switch on for approxi- To Disarm The System mately 3 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Push UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the ON/RUN position. the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when After approximately 3 seconds, the Vehicle Security the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock Light will flash. This shows that the Vehicle Security cylinder. Alarm is fully armed. The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time. remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors, hood when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 sound. If this occurs, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. 2 Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) — If Equipped This safety device prevents the operation of the interior door handles and the door locking/unlocking button. It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to break-in attempts (e.g. broken window). We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device each time you park your car. Safe Lock Device Location 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Activating The Safe Lock Device Deactivating The Safe Lock Device The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically: quickly double-pushing the LOCK button on the RKE • By pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmittransmitter. ter’; The direction indicators flash three times and the LED • By turning the ignition key to the MAR position. above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside the This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and passenger compartment by entering the car through, and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitthen closing, the open door. ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.” Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote Control If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Request For Additional Remote Controls The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls. Should a new remote control be necessary, go to an authorized dealer, taking an ID document and the car ownership documents. Key Fob Components To replace the battery, proceed as follows: • push button A to open the metal insert B; THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 • turn the screw C to Unlock using a small screwdriver; NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the • take out the battery case D and replace the battery E user’s authority to operate the equipment. making sure that polarities are correct; If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it distance, check for these two conditions: turning the screw C to Lock. 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as the battery is a minimum of three years. specified by law, see your authorized dealer for assis2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tance needed. tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB General Information radios. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Press the central LOCK/UNLOCK button located on the instrument panel, in the switch bank below the radio. The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked. • LED ON: doors locked. Pressing the central LOCK/ UNLOCK button once will unlock all doors. The LED will switch off once the doors are unlocked. • LED OFF: doors unlocked. Pressing the central LOCK/UNLOCK button once will lock all doors. The LED will switch on once the doors are locked. Central LOCK/UNLOCK Button Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmitter, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by pressing central LOCK/UNLOCK button. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE: With central locking active (LED ON), opening one of the front doors, it is possible to perform a central unlocking (LED OFF). With central locking active (LED ON), in order to open one of the rear passenger doors, it is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice. With one of the rear door open (LED OFF), the unlocking is performed only for that door, not for all the vehicle. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must pull the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the door handle a second time to open the door. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the vehicle OFF, apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into REVERSE, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (Continued) 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open It is possible locking the vehicle through the RKE, internal button or external key pawl, also if one or more doors are open. At lock command request, LED is switched ON. At closing of the last door, the vehicle maintains the central locking status if key is not inserted in Ignition Device, otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked and the LED will be switched OFF. NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch, but is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize the presence of the key and after the closing of last door, the vehicle remains locked. Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON), if a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF), as soon as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED ON). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock 1. Open the rear door. the doors using the central unlock button, roll down the 2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate window and open the door using the exterior handle. clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise to UNLOCK position. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The power window controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front passenger door, which operate the front passenger window and a single switch on each rear door that operates the rear passenger door window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. A — Driver Front Window Switch B — Passenger Front Window Switch C — Window Lockout Switch D — Driver Rear Window Switch E — Passenger Rear Window Switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE: The power window switches will remain active for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Auto-Down The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for approximately one second, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Resetting The Auto Up Feature • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up: down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue first detent and hold to close the window manually. to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing. after the window is fully open. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. LIFTGATE WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. (RKE) transmitter or activate the central locking button However, because the gas pressure drops with temperalocated on the instrument panel below the radio. ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic release opening the liftgate in cold weather. and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Liftgate Emergency Release As a security measure, a Liftgate Emergency Release is built into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows: 1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats completely 2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied 3. With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow color (A) Yellow Tab Location THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4. Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS trigger the release tab of the trunk (follow the direction Some of the most important safety features in your arrow to open) vehicle are the restraint systems: • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Release Tab Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, shoulder belts properly. move the seat as far back as possible and use the 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle Air Bags room to inflate. seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween you and the door and you could be injured. positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided them or under their arm. under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or Seat Belt Systems outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver outboard front seat belts are buckled. and could cause a collision that includes you. This can The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle happen far away from home or on your own street. speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) (Continued) 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING! (Continued) • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. Positioning The Lap Belt 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the Seat Belt Extender webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest shoulder belt. position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the anchor point. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch pant, it must be removed. plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be If Equipped worn snugly and positioned properly. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Restraints” section of this manual. The table below Energy Management Feature defines the type of feature for each seating position. This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the outboard front and rear seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage: Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to Driver Center Passenger remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic First Row N/A N/A ALR Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Second Row ALR ALR ALR Children 12 years old and under should always be • N/A — Not Applicable properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. • ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. (Continued) 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bag System Components • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Knee Impact Bolsters • Advanced Front Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bags (SAB) • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat system components: belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the • Air Bag Warning Light instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Steering Wheel and Column words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. • Instrument Panel THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags. driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air sensors or other system components. bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, Advanced Front Air Bag Features The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Knee Impact Bolsters The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the hanced protection during a frontal impact by working driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Front Air Bags. Air Bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing), in addition to the injury • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim structure. covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing), in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover (if equipped with rollover SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front sensing) or side impact events. and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing). The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event (if equipped with rollover sensing) is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. (Continued) Side Impacts In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side event may be in progress and whether deployment is impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. appropriate. The rollover sensing system may deploy the seat belt pretensioners with the SABs and SABICs on The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, both sides of the vehicle, if the vehicle experiences a including some collisions at certain angles, or some side rollover event. collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during If A Deployment Occurs angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate Front Air Bags deploy. immediately after deployment. Rollover Events (If Equipped with Rollover Sensing) NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the air bag system. the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle or all of the following may occur: damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions Side Air Bags should have deployed. and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricThe rollover sensing system determines if a rollover tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE: skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inauthorized dealer immediately. structions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Enhanced Accident Response System System Reset Procedure In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message “Fuel Cutoff” is displayed. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. • Cut off fuel to the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or both be blinking and will continue to blink until the until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position. ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. In order to • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in follow the system reset procedure. the “OFF” position. • Unlock the doors automatically. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or reset procedure must be performed again in order to be it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. successful. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds Air Bag Warning Light for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the The air bags must be ready to inflate for your ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. not inflate. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE These data can help provide a better understanding of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a is designed to record such data as: crash investigation. Event Data Recorder (EDR) • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened; such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the tor and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Child Restraints WARNING! (Continued) Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for ecuted for ignoring it. children from newborn size to the child almost large Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructhe rear seats rather than in the front. tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so (Continued) Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. (Continued) Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 2 • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? No N/A Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, all. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Lower Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback, near the floor. 2 Tether Anchorage Routing Position Upper Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autothe strap after it is attached to the anchorage. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section Center Seat LATCH: “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. WARNING! • Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a ing position. child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, tions to attach a tether anchor. buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the turer’s instructions. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them. in any direction. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 2 • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes Yes No Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be removed Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing position. For some second row seats, you may need to retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor the child restraint rearward and downward into the to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. vehicle seat. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect “click.” the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the (Continued) 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 CAUTION! WARNING! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a able. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 2 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .93 䡵 OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD . . . . . .110 ▫ Conversation Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .94 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .113 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 䡵 SEATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .118 ▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .132 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .122 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .132 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .123 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .136 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .137 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .140 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .141 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped . .152 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES . . . . . . . .153 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Securing Your Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .161 ▫ Power Sun Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. 3 NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Conversation Mirror — If Equipped There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the overhead console. Conversation Mirror Conversation Mirror Location To gain access to the conversation mirror, pull downward on the mirror to the open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror. 3 Power Mirror Controls 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Sun Visors Sun Visor (Driver Side Shown) The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addirotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors. sun. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor SEATS downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the Front Seats “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position. Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. “Slide-On-Rod” Feature 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Seat Height Adjustment Adjusting Bar The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position. 3 Height Adjustment Lever Recliner Adjustment The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and release the Recline Lever 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Power Lumbar — If Equipped Press the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar support. Release the switch when you reach the desired position. Power Lumbar Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt On some models, the front driver and passenger seats within two to five minutes. may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions WARNING! and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the outer side of the seat. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Heated Seats — If Equipped Heated Seat Switch because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the floor. the seat adjusters have latched. Rear Seats WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Reclining Rear Seats The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position, release the handle. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Fold And Tumble Rear Seat NOTE: • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to reposition the front seats. • Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily. Rear Seat Recliner Handle 1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper outboard side of the seat. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Seatback Release Lever 2. Fold the seatback forward. Seatback Folded 3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side of the seat and lift upward on the lever. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 3 Seatback Recline Lever 4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward. Folding Rear Seat 5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the seat into position. 6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback into position. 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Armrest — If equipped To use the armrest, lower it downward. Armrest Cupholder Folding Rear Seat Armrest UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Head Restraints Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealership. WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Adjustment Button The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position, see your authorized dealership immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Rear Head Restraints The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints, the outboard head restraints have two comfort positions, while the central head restraint have to use in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the centre seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver, when the center seat is being occupied the head restraint has to be in the raised position. 3 To raise the outboard head restraints, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraints, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. NOTE: Push Buttons • The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the head restraints require removal, see you authorized dealer. 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before To open the hood, two latches must be released to open Starting Your Vehicle” the hood. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of an accident. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The safety catch lever is located under the center front edge of the hood. CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. Safety Catch Lever 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up- Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ward to the first detent for headlight operation. To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with DRL. The DRL function can be turned on or off through the touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for further information. High Beams Headlight Operation With the low beams activated, pull the multifunction lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the high beams. Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to turn off the high beams. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steermoved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to Lane Change Assist turn on until the lever is released. Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Parking Lights the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times then automatically turn off. To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to turn on the headlights. have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. Turn Signals Activation Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds. Flash-To-Pass UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console, press the switch to the on/right position from its center Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel position and the lights are always on. and hold it for more than two seconds. Deactivation Front Fog Lights — If Equipped 3 The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, just below the radio. Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console. The interior lights can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). On/Right Position 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch to the off/left position from its center Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are position and the lights are always off. turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed. Off/Left Position Center Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn on the left light. CAUTION! Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. Interior Light Timing (Center Position) There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position: • When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated. • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated. Map/Reading Light Switches • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) Front Windshield Wiper Operation • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be activated. raised or lowered to access these modes. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON/RUN position. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Windshield Wiper Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Intermittent Speed High Speed Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. Manual High Speed/Mist Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray speed. from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the Low Speed wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second Front Windshield Washer Operation detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Front Windshield Washer Operation • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Rear Window Wiper/Washer Activation Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to operate the rear window wiper as follows: 3 • In intermittent mode when the front windshield wiper is not operating. • In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front window wiper) when the front windshield wiper is operating. • In continuous mode with reverse engaged. Rear Window Wiper Operation With the front windshield wipers on and reverse gear Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever same way. pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as described for the windscreen wiper. 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever. Rear Window Washer Operation Deactivation The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is released. Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle up until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 — RES + 2 — ON/OFF 3 — CANCEL 4 — SET - UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Resume Speed U.S. Speed (mph) To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph button and release. Resume can be used at any speed increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the above 25 mph (40 km/h). button results in an increase of 1 mph. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inMetric Speed (km/h) crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underthe button results in an increase of 1 km/h. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to decrease until the button is released, then The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected the new set speed will be established. speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Accelerate For Passing U.S. Speed (mph) Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills button results in a decrease of 1 mph. The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will vehicle set speed. continue to decrease until the button is released, then NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains the new set speed will be established. speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations. Control. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indication of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent. Interaction With Trailer Towing The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Rear Park Assist Sensors Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated. The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist in (30 cm) away. system indicates the nearest obstacle. The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver. 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information). Visual signal (EVIC) • Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist Display” for further information). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 SIGNAL Failure MEANING Sensor or System failures INDICATION Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (where provided). While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) muted. display. The audible signal is turned off immediately if the The warning icon is illuminated and a message distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during Panel” for further information. maneuvers parallel to walls). The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indiA malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the Failure Indications 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor Park Assist System Usage Precautions is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the NOTE: Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist turned off automatically. system operating properly. Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va- • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10 care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster. CAUTION! (Continued) • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. CAUTION! • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. (Continued) WARNING! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball appears again. assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted performed only by an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position. NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for further information. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle. Zone Red Yellow Green Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater) 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. (Continued) HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicles battery. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sunvisor Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button. before you begin programming. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be Training The Garage Door Opener identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed. program while you push and hold the hand-held 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed transmitter button. HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly activates, programming is complete. and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actifrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Revate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to lease both buttons after the indicator light changes complete the training. from slow to rapid. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can erase the channels. usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indiTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, cator light in view. follow these steps: 3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. program while you push and hold the hand-held 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until transmitter button. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button. cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps. lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. before 1995. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling Code) Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® follow these steps: to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time-out in the same manner. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling not release the button. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor. ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. remaining steps. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you erase the channels. wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while programming, plug it back in at this time. you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmit- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button ter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully (Canadian/Gate Operator) accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. follow these steps: 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until door may open and close while you are programming. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and ming is complete and the garage door/device should follow all remaining steps. activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Using HomeLink® To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position and the press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position, HomeLink® will remain active for three minutes. During this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink® is disabled. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all HomeLink.com for information or assistance. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. Security 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with an electrically operated sun blind. 3 The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be operated only with the ignition key turned to the ON/ RUN position. The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switches 1 — Power Sun Blind Switch 2 — Power Sunroof Switch 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. To Open • Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. NOTE: During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. To Close • With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and hold the power sunroof switch for approximately one second. NOTE: During Express close any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing stages, if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of will stop the blind movement. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the POWER OUTLETS windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Passenger Compartment Power Socket rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with The power outlet is located on the central tunnel, in front the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows of the shift lever, between the two cup holders. It only together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs operates with the ignition key at MAR/ON. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to On models with optional ⬙smoker’s kit,⬙ the cigar lighter minimize the buffeting or open any window. takes the place of the power socket (see ⬙Cigar lighter⬙ Power Sun Blind paragraph). • Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move towards the rear part of the car, until it is fully open. Wind Buffeting With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move towards the front part of the car, until it is fully closed. 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED This is located on the central tunnel, next to the parking brake lever. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use. Passenger Compartment Power Socket NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. NOTE: • Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off. • Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. Cigar Lighter — If Equipped 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- located in the center armrest. cated on the floor console between the front seats. CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholder Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 STORAGE Glove Compartment Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove compartment which is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Push the latch button upward on the upper glove compartment door to open it. Pull outward on the lower glove compartment latch to open the lower glove compartment. Push the upper glove compartment door down to close it and the lower glove compartment door upward to close it. 3 Upper And Lower Glove Compartments 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped The front center armrest contains a storage compartment. To open the storage compartment push in the upper release latch on the front of the armrest. Glove Compartment Storage Armrest Upper Release Latch Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage area. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 The front center armrest can also be lifted up and adjusted in three positions, this is done by pulling up on the armrest, push the latch down to adjust the armrest down. REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES The car features a load platform which can be adjusted to three different heights, permitting modular luggage compartment volume: • Position 1 (platform completely lowered) permits maximum luggage compartment capacity. • Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits a level load threshold to facilitate loading/unloading of objects in the luggage compartment. It also allows the space underneath to be used as a additional compartment for stowing objects which are more fragile or small. Front Center Armrest Raised Position • Position 3 (platform completely raised) in conjunction with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger side seat backrests, permits long objects to be loaded. It is advisable to use this position only for the actual period in which the objects are transported, then return the platform to position 1 or 2. 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Tilt of cargo floor The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle (tilted toward the rear seat backs), in order to facilitate access to the area below the luggage compartment. In this position also the plan guarantees the correct locking of any objects present inside the cargo area, avoiding that they move in the event of sudden braking. Tilt Floor Feature CAUTION! The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maximum capacity of a distributed weight of 154 lbs (70kg) (if positioned at threshold level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 CAUTION! (Continued) positioned at raised level) do not add objects with a higher weight. 3 Access to double load compartment To access the double load compartment, proceed as follows: 1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it with one hand. Load Platform 1 — Handle 2 — Platform 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the desired objects in compartment. Platform Housings Load Compartment 1 — Front Locations 3. Then reposition the platform correctly in the housings 2 — Rear Locations on the side panels and rear crossmember. NOTE: Movements of the load platform must take place in a central position relative to the luggage compartment. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Moving the load platform To move the load platform from lower to upper position, proceed as follows: 1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding it with one hand. 3 Load Platform 1 — Handle 2 — Platform 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Position the platform correctly on housing on the side Securing Your Load panels. There are two tie downs inside the luggage compartment for attaching cables which can secure the load carried. A further two tie downs located on the rear crossmember. Raised Position 1 — Front Housing Locations 2 — Rear Housing Locations Cargo Tie Down Locations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags). To use the hooks, press the release button. CAUTION! The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is 22 lbs (10 kg). 3 Cargo Side Panel Hook Locations 1 — Release Button 2 — Hook 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Storage Compartments REAR WINDOW FEATURES There are two storage compartments located on the rear Rear Window Defroster side panels. The rear window defroster button is located with the climate controls on the instrument panel. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. Roof Rack Attachment Points Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .167 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 ▫ EVIC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL . . . . .187 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .188 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .190 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Manual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ Navigation (6.5A/6.5AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 — Side Vent 2 — Steering Wheel Audio Control — Located On Back Side Of Steering Wheel 3 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 4 — Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 5 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer 6 — Central Air Vents 7 — Fixed Upper Air Vent 8 — Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 13 — Climate Controls 14 — USB Port/SD Card/AUX Socket 9 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Storage Compartment 11 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Upper Switch Bank 15 — Uconnect® Audio System 16 — Ignition Switch 17 — Driver Advanced Front Air Bag / Horn 18 — Electronic Speed Control Located On Steering Wheel 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1. Speedometer 4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is 2. Cruise SET Indicator — If Equipped turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on conThis light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the standing Your Instrument Panel.” problem diagnosed and corrected. 3. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indicator The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to Light flash as soon as the ESC system or TCS system become This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- active. trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver. The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h). 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces• The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/ sary. Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily WARNING! each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. NOTE: • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. 5. Brake Warning Light Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by there is a problem with the brake system res- turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position ervoir. to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is 8. Fuel Gauge detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the inspected by an authorized dealer. digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the The light also will turn on when the parking brake is fuel tank. applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiNOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately tion. update accurately when refueling with the engine on. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 9. Turn Signal Indicators applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. The arrows will flash in unison with the exte6. Rear Defrost Light rior turn signal, when using the turn signal This indicator will illuminate when the rear winlever. dow defroster is on. The rear window defroster 10. Temperature Gauge automatically turns off after 20 minutes. The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem7. Low Fuel Light perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gallon that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. (7.6L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaadded. ture when driving in hot weather, or up mountain 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph. 11. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 12. High Beam Indicator 14. Tachometer This light indicates that the headlights are on high The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. prevent engine damage. 13. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home (Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped 15. Seat Belt Reminder Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator will illuminate and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will show how long the function remains active. For further information, refer to “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle”. When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 16. Air Bag Warning Light 18. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light will turn on for four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. 17. Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Light Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator 19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Light should come on and remain on for at The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of least four seconds as a bulb check when the an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN monitors engine and Euro Twin Clutch Transmisposition. If the Passenger Air Bag Disable Warning Light sion control systems. The light will illuminate when the is flashing, contact your authorized dealer as soon as key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the possible for inspection. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 20. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly. not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. 21. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds. If equipped with a block heater harness the message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. 22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).” 23. Fuel Door Location Reminder The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the right side of the vehicle. 24. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER during starting, have the system checked by an autho- (EVIC) rized dealer. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the 25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light instrument cluster. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition The EVIC consists of the following: switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and • System Status may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate • Outside Temperature Display normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. • Trip Computer Functions If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced EVIC Screen as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the The EVIC will display the following: ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have • Time the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers • Outside temperature • Gear Indicator Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. Push and release the DOWN button to scroll down• Odometer (display of distance travelled in miles/ ward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed. kilometers) and DOWN buttons activate differ• Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice on NOTE: UP ent functions according to the following situations: road, service, etc.) • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. EVIC Control Buttons The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument • To increase or decrease values during settings. panel below the radio. NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the display will turn on the clock, the external temperature menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/ menu option. Push and hold the MENU button (approxi- markets, where provided) for a few seconds. mately one second) to return to the main screen. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu • Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the cycle. The menu includes the following functions: main menu option to set. • Dimmer • Speed Buzzer • First Page • Buzzer Volume • Belt Buzzer • Hill Start • Exit Menu or DOWN Push and release the UP single pushes) to select the new setting. button (by Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected. • Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the first submenu option. or DOWN button (by Push and release the UP single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options. 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the Change Engine Oil Indicator System displayed submenu option and to open the relevant Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change setup menu. indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will or DOWN button (by flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds Push and release the UP single pushes) to select the new setting for this sub- after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change menu option. indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent new setting and go back to the previously selected upon your personal driving style. submenu option. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Push and release and hold the MENU button to return to time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and hold). release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not start the engine.) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 4 Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed and travel time). Trip Button • A short button push displays the different values. The TRIP button, located on the right steering column • A long button push resets the system and then starts a stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously new trip. described values. 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL New Trip Start Of Trip Procedure To reset: With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system over one second to reset. manually. Exit Trip • When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than (99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto- one second. matically. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxisystem. mately one second) to go back to the main screen without NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of storing settings. the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor- Trip Functions mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new reset. trip). “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 • Trip distance A Values Displayed • Average Economy A Range • Instant Economy • Travel time A (driving time). This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases: “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). • Trip distance B • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running. • Average speed A • Average Economy B • Average speed B • Travel time B (driving time). NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset. NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the above notes. 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Distance Traveled Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. Features) Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert® Average Economy Indication) This value shows the approximate average consumption This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group since the last reset. Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the BeltAlert® Instant Economy system. Refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- System BeltAlert®” in “Occupant Restraints” for further stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the information. display if the car is parked with the engine running. To reactivate this function, proceed as follows: or DOWN button • Push and release the UP briefly; ⬙Off⬙ will flash on the display. Push and This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcor DOWN button and ⬙On⬙ release the or UP tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. will appear; Travel Time • Push and release the SET ESC button briefly to return This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. to the submenu screen or hold the button down to return to the main menu screen without saving. Average Speed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning Buzzer Volume) Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit) With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany- (mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to immediately alerted. one of eight volume levels. To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: To adjust the volume proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The dis1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The preplay will show the message (Speed Beep). viously set volume “level” will flash on the display. or DOWN button to 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for select speed limit activation (On) or deactivation 2. Push and release the UP setting. (Off). 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU release the MENU button to display the presently set or DOWN button (approximately one second) to go back to the activation speed. Pushing the UP buttons selects the speed limit. Push MENU to main screen without storing the settings. confirm selection. 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 – 125 mph or (32 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back – 201 km/h), depending on the selected unit. The setting to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU will increase/decrease by five units each time the UP/ button (approximately one second) to go back to the DOWN button is pushed. Push and hold the UP/DOWN main screen without storing the settings. button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the Dimmer setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach NOTE: The brightness of IPC will change automatically the required setting. only if the External light has changed: External light On= • Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back Night Mode, External Light OFF= Day Mode. In both to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU case (Day or Night) is possible to adjust the display button (approximately one second) to go back to the brightness as described in step 1 below. main screen without storing the settings. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: or DOWN button to 1. Push and release the UP 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will set the required brightness level. flash on the display. 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back button. “Off” will 2. Push and release the DOWN to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU flash on the display. (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Hill Start Assist Exit Menu This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal. This function closes the initial menu screen. Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the main screen. button to return to the first Push and release the menu option (Speed Beep). Push and release the button to return to the last 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or menu option (Daylights). “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting). Uconnect® RADIOS or DOWN button for For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, 2. Push and release the UP setting. refer to your Uconnect® supplement Manual. 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL to the menu screen, or push and hold the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port. screen without storing the settings. 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located at the rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. USB/AUX Ports 1 — USB Connector 2 — AUX/Cable Jack Refer to the Uconnect® 5.0/6.5 User’s Manual for iPod® and external USB support capability. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset button. AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/ Player Operation enter an item while scrolling through menu. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of the switch control is different depending on which mode you are in. once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one The following describes the left-hand control operation in second after the current track begins to play. each mode. If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, precautions: or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service. surface. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in wiping from center to edge. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the or anti-static sprays. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 CLIMATE CONTROLS 1. Temperature Control Manual Climate Control System Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Controls 2. Recirculation Control Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials, an inner push knob and two push buttons. 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: 4. A/C Button • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is Extended use of this mode is not recommended. engaged. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp MAX A/C weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Semodes at the same time. lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. ECONOMY MODE • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn Defrost. OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, • The A/C can be deselected manually without dismove the temperature control to the desired temperature. turbing the mode control selection. 5. Rear Defrost Control 3. Blower Control Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when speed increases as you move the control to the right from the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 6. Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). • Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. • Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. • Bi-Level NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the • Floor windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes Air is directed through the floor outlets with a only when necessary. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear Window Defrosting Air Recirculation Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn Push and release the Air Recirculation button, so that the the function on/off. LED on the button switch is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation The activation of the function is indicated by the rear on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching introduction of polluted air. on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes. Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on board, to prevent the If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate windows from misting up. defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window. NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated reach the required heating or cooling conditions more rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the that might cause them to stop working properly. internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Air Distribution Selection Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger compartment: Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passenger’s body). Air flow to windshield and side windows. Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield Air flow to the front windshield, front side win- distribution activates the climate control system comdow and front/rear footwell diffusers. pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation is set to ⬙outside air⬙ (LED on Recirculation Control button off ). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This the windows. The user can always set air recirculation air distribution allows the passenger compart- and climate control system compressor. ment to be heated quickly. Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents. 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Additional Electric Heater (If Equipped) System Maintenance The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen- In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at ger compartment heating. least once a month for about 10 minutes. It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following Have the system inspected at a Fiat dealership before the conditions are verified: summer. • outside temperature low; • engine coolant temperature low; • engine on; • fan speed set to 1st speed; • Temperature Control knob turned completely clockwise to red section. The heater is switched off when at least one of the conditions above is no longer verified. NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated according to the battery voltage. NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a allowed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System (If Equipped) Controls 1. Driver Temperature Control Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature. NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. 2. Recirculation Control Push and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when ON. NOTE: • When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk. Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) • When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is ON. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Rear Defrost Control 6. Blower Control Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes. Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob. 4. A/C Control 7. Blower Control Indicator LEDs Push and release the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn OFF. LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed. 5. ON/OFF Control 8. Mode Control The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets. 9. Front Defrost Control Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control Push and release the Front Defrost Control button to ON/OFF. change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor is switched ON (LED on button ON) and the air recirculation is switched OFF (LED on button OFF). If the front defrost mode is turned OFF, the climate system will return to the previous setting. 10. Passenger Temperature Control enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. 12. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Provides the passenger with independent temperature Description control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperaThe automatic dual zone climate control system regulates ture. the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control two zones: driver side and passenger side. knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync. The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com11. SYNC Button partment and compensates for possible variations in Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. external climate conditions. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The climate control system can recognize extremely cold Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the (or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart- system will only override the settings for safety reasons. ment and consequently provide optimal management of Manual selections always take priority over automatic the system’s capabilities. ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or NOTE: The reference temperature is 72° F (22° C) for the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons. optimal comfort management. The amount of air introduced into the passenger comThe automatically controlled parameters and functions are: partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by • air temperature at the driver/front passenger side the fan, which is controlled electronically. vents; The air temperature is always automatically controlled according to the temperature set on the display (except • fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow); for when the system is off or in certain conditions when • compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying the compressor is not running). the air); The system allows the following to be set or adjusted • air recirculation. manually: All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat- • driver/passenger side air temperature; ing the system, selecting one or more functions and • fan speed (continuous variation); modifying their parameters. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 • air distribution to seven positions; Switching On The Climate Control System • compressor enablement; The climate control system can be switched on in different ways: it is advisable to push the AUTO button and turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures. • rapid defrosting/demisting function; • air recirculation; In this way the system operates completely automatically to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment. It • system deactivation. also manages the air recirculation function and the actiNOTE: The climate control system detects the passenger vation of the air conditioning compressor. compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem- During automatic operation, you can change the set perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any time and protected by a specific cover. Obstructing the field of by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will view of this sensor with any object could cause the automatically change the settings to adjust to the new climate control system to operate with less than optimal requirements. efficiency. • heated rear window; 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL During completely automatic operation (AUTO), varying the air flow and/or distribution (which are not displayed) causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and the system to operate in MANUAL mode (displaying both the flow and distribution requested). When the compressor is deactivated, the AUTO operation remains active only if the system can guarantee in-car comfort. Otherwise, the system switches to MANUAL mode (the set temperatures will flash on the display). The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger compartment. Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature between the two zones. Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones. Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heating) or ⬙LO⬙ (maximum cooling) functions respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature. Adjusting The Air Temperature Air Distribution Selection Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger Temperature Control, dial clockwise or anti clockwise, to adjust the air temperature in the front left (Driver Temperature Control) or right (Passenger Temperature Control) zone of the passenger compartment. By pushing the Mode Control buttons (Up/Down/Right arrows), it is possible to set one of the seven possible air distributions manually: The set temperatures are shown on the displays. • Up Arrow – Air flow to the windshield and front side window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 with maximum temperature settings for best wind- • Up/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between shield and side window defrosting. When the defrost footwell diffusers and windshield and front side window defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting almode is selected, the blower will automatically default lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effecto medium-high. tively and prevents the windows from misting. • Right Arrow – Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot • Up/Right Arrows – Air flow distribution between windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central season. dashboard vents. This allows air to be sent to the • Down Arrow – Air flow to the front and rear footwell windshield in conditions of strong sunlight. diffusers. This air distribution setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sen- • Up/Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distribution to all sation of warmth. diffusers on the car. • Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution setting is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days. NOTE: Air always flows from the side dashboard diffusers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow by operating the wheel located near the corresponding vents. 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically AUTO Button manages air distribution (the LEDs on the Mode Control When the AUTO button is pushed (LED on button lit) the buttons are off ). climate control system automatically adjusts the followWhen set manually, the air distribution is indicated by ing settings in the corresponding zones: the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on. • quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment In combined function mode, functions are enabled together with those already set when the relevant button is • climate control system compressor and pushed. If a button whose function is already active is pushed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding • air recirculation. LED switches off. Cancelling all previous manual adjustments. To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button manual selection, push the AUTO button. switching on. If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on, the system switches to completely manual mode; it displays the current flow and distribution status, which will no longer be managed automatically. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 If a manual intervention is made on at least the air Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the distribution, on compressor button or on the fan speed, passenger side temperature and return to separate air the LED switches off to indicate that the system is no temperature management. longer controlling all functions automatically. Air Recirculation NOTE: Should the system no longer be able to guarantee The Air Recirculation is managed according to the folthe required temperature set in various passenger com- lowing operating logics: partment zones, the set temperature value will flash for a • forced activation (air recirculation always on): indifew seconds on the display. cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button; To restore automatic system control after one or more • forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air manual adjustments, push the AUTO button. intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the SYNC Button Recirculation Control button switching off. Push the SYNC button (LED on button lit) to align the Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by pushpassenger side air temperature with that of the driver ing the Recirculation Control button. side. When the On/Off button is pushed, the climate control This function makes temperature regulation easier when system automatically activates internal air recirculation the driver is travelling alone. (LED on Recirculation Control button on). 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto- Climate Control System Compressor matically by the system according to outside environ- Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the mental conditions. compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the button switching on). NOTE: • The engagement of the recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside (especially if the climate control system is off ). When the outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off (air drawn in from the outside) to prevent the windows from misting up. • It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when the outside temperature is low, since the windows could mist up rapidly. The system remembers that the compressor has been switched off, even after the engine has stopped. When the compressor is switched off, the system deactivates air recirculation to prevent the windows from misting up. Pushing the A/C button will stop the AUTO MODE (the AUTO LED will switch off). To restore automatic control of compressor engagement, push the AUTO button again. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced • directs air flow to windshield and front side window diffusers; to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Moreover, under certain • activates the heated rear window; environmental conditions, windows could mist rapidly • activates the heated windshield (if equipped); since the air is not dehumidified. Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-DEF function) • displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED lit). Push the MAX-DEF button to activate (LED on button on) the windshield and side window demisting function. NOTE: The Front Defrost Control (MAX-DEF) function remains on for about three minutes from when the engine The climate control system carries out the following coolant reaches the appropriate temperature. operations: When the function is activated, the LED on the AUTO • switches on the air conditioning compressor when button switches off. With the function activated the only environmental conditions are suitable; possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed • switches air recirculation off; and turning the heated rear window off. • sets fan speed according to the engine coolant tem- When the Recirculation Control, Rear Defrost Control , or perature; AUTO buttons are pushed, the climate control system will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield dis- If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate tribution activates the climate control system compressor defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window. (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation is set to NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated ⬙outside air⬙ intake (LED on the recirculation button off ). rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. that might cause them to stop working properly. It is, however, always possible to manage air recirculation Switching Off The Climate Control System and the climate control system compressor manually. Push the On/Off button. Rear Window Defrosting With climate control system off: Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear window defrosting. • air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger compartment from the outside; The effective activation of the function is indicated by the rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel • the compressor is off; switching ON. • the fan is off; This function switches OFF automatically after about 20 • the heated rear window can be activated / deactiminutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not vated. switched on automatically the next time the engine is started. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 NOTE: The climate control system control unit stores the Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS temperatures set before the system was switched off and Introducing Uconnect® restores them when any button of the system is pushed Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these (except for the A/C Control button). helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands To restart the climate control system in fully automatic and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 mode push the AUTO button. or 6.5A/6.5AN system. Additional Heater (If Equipped) This allows the passenger compartment to be heated more quickly in cold weather conditions. The heater switches off automatically when the required comfort conditions are achieved. The additional heater activates automatically depending on the environmental conditions and with engine started. NOTE: The heater only operates if the outside temperature and engine coolant temperature are low. The heater will not activate if the battery voltage is too low. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect® 5.0N Key Features: Uconnect® 6.5AN Key Features: • Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/ • 6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/ USB/Bluetooth® USB/SD Card/Bluetooth® • Bluetooth with integrated voice control • Bluetooth with integrated voice control • GPS navigation (if equipped) • GPS navigation (if equipped) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first Uconnect® Voice Command push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Rethe beep, then say your Voice Command. ceive A Text 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 2 — Push to MUTE by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice 3 — Push To End Call 4 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Media or Climate functions Command from current category. 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system. Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Cancel to stop a current voice session • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Uconnect® 5.0 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands. Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Radio Uconnect® 5.0 Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Uconnect® offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth® Command must match exactly how the artist, album, and Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only song and genre information is displayed. available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Media 4 . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth® • Change source to iPod® • Change source to USB • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect® 5.0 Media 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. . After the beep, say one of Push the Phone button the following commandsѧ • Call John Smith • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Media • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) • Call back (call previous incoming phone number) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone and say “Call,” then pronounce the name button exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” 4 Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Phone Uconnect® 5.0 Phone 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Navigation (6.5A/6.5AN) The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button the beep, say: . After • For the 6.5AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” . Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Navigation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Voice Text Reply Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push . After the beep, say: “Reply” the Phone button PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES I’ll call you I need See you in later. directions. of minutes. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. Thanks. TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit system prompts. UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later. Start without No. I’ll be Late. me. Okay. Where are you? I will be minutes Are you there Call me. late. yet? 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Additional Information Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET Uconnect® System Support: • U.S. residents call DriveUconnect.com 1-877-855-8400 or visit • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call. STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .224 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .224 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .231 ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — ▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21-250 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 HD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .227 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .262 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .257 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .257 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .265 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .271 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .273 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 STARTING AND OPERATING 223 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .281 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .290 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .292 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .306 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Automatic Transmission — If Equipped access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK. in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting operate power windows, other controls, or move NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. NOTE: Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. Extended Park Starting Cold Weather Operation NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low has not been started or driven for at least 35 days. temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externally 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it powered electric engine block heater is available as a when the engine starts. factory installed option. 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a Extended Park Starting procedure. reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with a Euro Twin Clutch Transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. Turbo Charger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending STARTING AND OPERATING 227 on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED 5 WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. Shift Pattern (Six-Speed) Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you can result from starting in third. release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. 228 STARTING AND OPERATING For most city driving you will find it easier to use only Downshifting the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and accelerations, sixth gear is recommended. prolong engine life. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or CAUTION! try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift clutch. at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below the cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE (R) selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to position. the clutch and the transmission can result from Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal complete stop. is held pressed (i.e., not released). NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis- down to second or first when descending a steep grade. sion. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade, NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur- shifting out of PARK. dened. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Key Ignition Park Interlock Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- Equipped lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK The transmission gear position display (located in the before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re- You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmis- to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on the front of the sion is locked in PARK. shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift The electronically-controlled transmission provides a Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal ON/RUN position (engine running or not), and the condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few brake pedal (and the lock button on the shift lever) must hundred miles (kilometers). be pressed. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the Autostick® (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates Autostick® mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or Transmission Shift Lever rearward (+) while in the Autostick® position will manuThis transmission is programmed to prevent shifting ally select the transmission gear. from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety feature helps protect your transmission from damage. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the STARTING AND OPERATING 233 NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before NEUTRAL into another gear range. shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiallow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added This is especially important when the engine is cold. precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. 5 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. STARTING AND OPERATING 237 WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. To maximize fuel economy, the Euro Twin Clutch Six Speed Transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become familiar with some of the normal operational characteristics of this transmission: • During low-speed driving conditions in first gear, vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING • At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar • When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as to a manual transmission as the transmission changes when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head gears. These noises are normal and will not damage winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to the transmission. “AutoStick” in this section for further information) to • Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a odor similar to a manual transmission. An active lower gear will improve performance and extend warning message will display in the Instrument Clustransmission life by reducing excessive shifting and ter if cool down actions are needed. heat buildup. • When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to • During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start will not operate if the oil temperature is -22° F (-30° C) Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position or below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator transmission in PARK in order to warm the fluid. pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll Normal operation will resume once the transmission back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or temperature has risen to a suitable level. press the accelerator to climb the hill. • Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise is normal and will not damage the transmission. STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Instrument Cluster Messages Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur. These messages are described below. MESSAGE GEAR UNAVAILABLE SHIFT NOT ALLOWED DESCRIPTION In AutoStick mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service. The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This occurs if REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster). Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING MESSAGE SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – THEN DRIVE OR REVERSE AUTOMATIC UNAVAILABLE REDUCE GEAR CHANGES DESCRIPTION The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault condition, or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released), but the shift lever remains in gear. Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving. If the transmission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer. The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault condition. Use the AutoStick mode to shift the transmission manually. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service. The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick mode, try to drive in one specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE, the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 MESSAGE TRANSMISSION GETTING HOT PRESS BRAKE TRANS. HOT STOP SAFELY SHIFT TO PARK WAIT TO COOL TRANSMISSION COOL READY TO DRIVE SERVICE TRANSMISSION SERVICE SET PARK BRAKE DESCRIPTION The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated launches in stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed. The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over, shift the transmission into PARK, and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed. The transmission has cooled down and the vehicle is OK to drive. A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service. A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service. The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly. Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Transmission Limp Home Mode 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th [with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer following steps: service is required. 1. Stop the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21-250 HD) — If Equipped The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. 5 The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new Transmission Shift Lever vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. hundred miles (kilometers). Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual 244 STARTING AND OPERATING shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the Autostick position will manually select the transmission gear. NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on STARTING AND OPERATING 245 the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 247 CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the STARTING AND OPERATING 249 range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: ing. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may 1. Stop the vehicle. be modified depending on engine coolant temperature. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. ture has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument service is required. cluster. AUTOSTICK NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever providing manual shift control, giving you more control rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed. and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, • The transmission will automatically downshift as the city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will and many other situations. display the current gear. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever • The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. • With six-speed automatic (Aisin F21-250 HD) transmission, you can start out (from a stop) in first, second, STARTING AND OPERATING 251 or third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can position at any time without taking your foot off the be helpful in snow or icy conditions. To select second accelerator pedal. or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice. WARNING! • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES because the transmission will not shift automatically. Acceleration • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipAutoStick is engaged. pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs fault or overheat condition is detected. when there is a difference in the surface traction under To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the the front (driving) wheels. DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). Traction 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/ wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON and the engine started. The steering allows the force required at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving conditions. NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full power steering functionality can be achieved after a few seconds. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual 1 — Parking Brake Release Button 2 — Parking Brake Lever transmission in REVERSE or first gear. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. slightly, press the side button with your thumb, then lower the lever completely. 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. BRAKE SYSTEM brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in Warning Light.” maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conIn the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to repeated brake applications with the engine off) the 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction Control System (TCS) Hill Start Assist (HSA) The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill. STARTING AND OPERATING 261 • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unvehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informafacing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill tion. is in REVERSE gear). Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. Disabling/Enabling HSA The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system with the electric power steering to increase the safety level of the whole car. In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip conditions), through the DST function the ESC system controls the steering to implement an additional torque contribution on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct manoeuvre to the driver. If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases done using the Customer Programmable Features in the the safety and car control feeling. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not replace the driver’s actions while driving the car. 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 263 ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE: when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes each time the ignition switch is turned ON. on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been will be ON even if it was turned off previously. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located off. in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information. Partial Off The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC Off Switch STARTING AND OPERATING 265 NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING! When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades STARTING AND OPERATING 267 • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M. tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded design standards. Tires designed to this standard have into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 269 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week STARTING AND OPERATING 271 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Term Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or spare tires. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and Loading trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the weight referenced here. the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. of this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE: cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the ing table shows examples on how to calculate total amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 650 lbs [295 kg]). purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • For the following example, the combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity calculated in step 4. (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 277 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • read Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability response or over responsiveness in the steering. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride. erratic and unpredictable steering response. Tire Inflation Pressures • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle to drift left or right. driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING At least once a month: 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual wall. judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with inflated. temperature changes. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe winter. ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire which could damage the valve stem. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original WARNING! equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Repair Tire Types If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped meets the following criteria: All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat. tween different all season tires. All season tires can be • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on (sidewall damage is not repairable). the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tires — If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and mode. wheel equivalent in look and function to the original STARTING AND OPERATING 285 equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time. compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on WARNING! the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited 80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be T, S = Temporary Spare Tire replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare WARNING! tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Full Size Spare — If Equipped Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced. ping. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. 5 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire 288 STARTING AND OPERATING These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is tenance schedule is highly recommended. worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. WARNING! Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce with oil, grease, and gasoline. tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. • Distance driven. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuthose of the original wheels. facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Replacement Tires 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. STARTING AND OPERATING 291 • Install on Front Tires Only. • Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, use reduced size snow chains or traction devices with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued) 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be unequal rates. reversed. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. Tire Rotation The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- order for the TPMS to receive this information. sure. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire natural pressure loss through the tire. pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire presPressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system sure value. will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be STARTING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. (Continued) NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stopping ability. stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainteModule. nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure. Light. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module. and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. the tire. Base System • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiinstrument cluster. nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire” STARTING AND OPERATING 297 text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire. warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. General Information 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 following conditions: seconds and then remain on solid. • This device may not cause harmful interference. 4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opTelltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and eration. then remain on solid. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and following licenses: reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire United States MRXC4W4MA4 Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single) long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure Canada STARTING AND OPERATING 299 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 87. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to fuel system components. your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyrequired. genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these are required in some areas of the country during the symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap- winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in ing service for the vehicle. your vehicle. 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol. vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. MMT In Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) fuel. is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. ADDING FUEL 1. Open the fuel filler door. 2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling. NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open. STARTING AND OPERATING 303 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. 5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can. 5 Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Funnel Location For vehicle With Optional Spare Tire Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Flat Tow NONE Dolly Tow Front Rear ALL Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK On Trailer Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21-250 HD Transmission ) NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with details. the front wheels OFF the ground). STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, or a Euro 4. Release the brake pedal only when the parking brake Twin Clutch transmission, may be flat towed (with all is applied, or the vehicle is securely connected to a tow four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed, vehicle. for any distance, if the transmission is in NEUTRAL. To place the Euro Twin Clutch transmission in NEUTRAL, follow the procedure below: 1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position. The key will remain in the ignition switch (it cannot be removed, since the transmission is not in PARK). Leave the key in the OFF position while being towed. CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .311 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .314 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .315 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 6 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE . . . . . . .342 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .340 䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 ▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . .341 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time (Continued) WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m) Steel Wheels Only 89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m) Aluminum Wheels Only M12 x 1.25 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 17 mm **Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. 6 Wheel Mounting Surface Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you Tire Service Kit Components And Operation to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear trunk area on the left side. 6 Tire Service Kit Components 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit) 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions turn to this position to inject the Tire • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to (6) when selecting this mode. assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” your original equipment vehicle dealer. (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material 6 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. (Continued) (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING! (Continued) • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position. 4. Set the parking brake. (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the from the fitting at the end of the hose. deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat 6 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire. valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the available. Make sure the engine is running before parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. turning ON the Tire Service Kit. • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes: Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6): NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomflowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing. As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure ment panel. indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). 6 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.” CAUTION! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. (D) Drive Vehicle: WARNING! Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. (E) After Driving: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position. Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. stem. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in Gauge (3). the vehicle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive service center. the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: panel after the tire has been repaired. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posand loading information label on the driver-side door sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceopening. ment”. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the DeflaNOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authotion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomrized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed mended inflation pressure before continuing. using the Tire Service Kit. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 6 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the recessed area under the sealant bottle. vehicle. 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED of it accordingly. 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing. 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place. WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 WARNING! (Continued) • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area underneath the cargo floor. 6 Jack Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 — — — — — — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel Jack Jack Handle Emergency Allen key Emergency Spare Tire Bag Emergency Screwdriver 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal 2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to lower the spare tire. 3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools. Spare Tire Location The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area on the outside of the car. 1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch. Winch Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 Preparations For Jacking 5. Turn Off the ignition. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (Euro Twin Clutch Transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 6 NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Instructions WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an Euro Twin Clutch Transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. Jack Warning Label (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench. 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 6 Front Jacking Location 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill flange. 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire. WARNING! Rear Jacking Location Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each 6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. side of the body (as indicated by the traingular lift point 7. Mount the spare tire. symbols on the sill molding). 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 CAUTION! WARNING! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. • To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. • To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. NOTE: • For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. • Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in handle counterclockwise. “Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased use, and operation. leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern 8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug wheel bolts. nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, 6 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES have them checked with a torque wrench by your Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire Bag and stow the flat tire into the trunk. authorized dealer or at a service station. 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Spare Tire Stowage another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly clockwise (the flat tire must not be connected to the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. winch) until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, heard indicating the winch is properly stowed. follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side of the engine compartment. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. 6 Positive Terminal 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the Euro Twin Clutch Transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull upward on the cover. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Follow these steps to disconnect the negative (-) battery cable: 1. Pull outward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal release lever to the open position. 2. Lift up on the negative (-) battery cable terminal and set aside. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. NOTE: Before connecting the jumper cables to the dis3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the charged battery, the negative (-) battery cable must be negative (-) post of the booster battery. disconnected from the discharged battery. This is the only way to successfully jump start the vehicle. 6 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper Disconnecting The Jumper Cables cable to the negative (-) battery cable terminal of the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the discharged vehicle. negative (-) battery cable terminal of the vehicle with the discharged battery. WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then NOTE: The negative (-) battery cable must be connected start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged to the negative (-) post of the battery. battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 Follow these steps to connect the negative (-) battery cable: 1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to the negative (-) post of the battery. CAUTION! (Continued) degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 2. Push inward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE release lever to the closed position. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE spected at your authorized dealer. and REVERSE (with Automatic or Euro Twin Clutch Transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual CAUTION! transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if wheels, or racing the engine. plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to (Continued) 6 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 WARNING! (Continued) explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the shift lever override access hole (at the right rear corner of the shift lever assembly) and push and hold the override release lever down. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 8. Reinstall the shift lever boot. moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the shift lever bezel and boot assembly from the center console. 6 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. CAUTION! Shift Lever Override TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.) Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other position. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 Manual Transmission Euro Twin Clutch Transmission • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). the ground). CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing. CAUTION! • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Automatic Transmission • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). CAUTION! (Continued) • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interin order to move the vehicle. lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ CAUTION! OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually, • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a proceed as follows: conventional automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require 1. Firmly apply the parking brake towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the 2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in ground. the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo box. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping control handle down. 4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of the travel position, then lock the steering column in position, push the control handle up until fully engaged. 5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column cover screws, and remove the lower cover. 6 Lower Steering Column Screw Locations 6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards. 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover. CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in the rear cargo area inside the tool bag (if equipped), or on the 7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column left side in the cargo box. If your vehicle is out of fuel and cover. an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. Release Tab Location For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this manual. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .347 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .348 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .373 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 7 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission — Aisin F21-250 HD Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 ▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .396 ▫ Rear Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO 7 1 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 — Battery 5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 9 — Oil Fill Cap 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and Euro Twin Clutch Transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. (Continued) 7 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 CAUTION! (Continued) temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for turbocharged engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- Grade) tion. MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recomNOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. months, whichever occurs first. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Engine Oil Filter ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter tion. at every engine oil change. Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals. environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. (Continued) 7 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING! (Continued) For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. WARNING! CAUTION! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward. service be performed by authorized dealer using recov4. Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter ery and recycling equipment. access door to the HVAC housing. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. A/C Air Filter WARNING! Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter: 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. 2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door. A/C Air Filter Access Door 5. Open the air filter access door. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 7 A/C Air Filter Access Door Open A/C Air Filter Removal 6. Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air 7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. the housing. 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Body Lubrication Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods The enabling condition for Service Position Strategy is to may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use have wiper in park position before turning OFF the Key. washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt The functionality can be activated only within 2 minutes from a dry windshield or rear window. from turning OFF the Key. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid half a second. damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. At every valid activation of Service Position command, the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- The Service Position command can be repeated several mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, times to bring the brushes into the desired position, up to water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are a maximum of 3 times. present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. After 3 subsequent activations the strategy is disabled. Service Position Strategy The service position shall allow user to change wiper blade and to protect the wiper blade in snow condition immediately after turning off the Key. 7 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Function deactivation: The functionality is reset if: • Turning ON the key. • Number of subsequent activations is 3. • 2 minutes timer has expired after turning OFF the key. NOTE: If when turning ON the key the blades are not in the parking position, the blades go into the parking position. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Release Button blade off of the windshield. 3 — Wiper Arm 2. Press the release button on the arm of the wiper blade. 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly press the wiper 3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it. blade until it snaps into place. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. 2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder. 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder 3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place. 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 WARNING! CAUTION! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age: portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in damage. motion. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Coolant Checks flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 MS.90032). months (before the onset of freezing weather, where 7 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that altrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that Adding Coolant 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomized water when mixing the water/engine coolant mended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as engine cooling system. possible. Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- Cooling System Pressure Cap cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine the vehicle is operated. coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant NOTE: (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank. • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 WARNING! • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick method for determining that the coolant level equate. With the engine off and cold, the level engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks. visual is adof the be be- As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to with your local authorities to determine the disposal maintain the proper level, it should be added to the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- coolant bottle. Do not overfill. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ for leaks. kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high 90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum compoized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine nents. coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. Points To Remember If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be condenser clean. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the In order to assure brake system performance, all brake fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake system components should be inspected periodically. fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked maintenance intervals. when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Brake System WARNING! NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does Brake Master Cylinder not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See when performing under hood services, or immediately if your local authorized dealer for service. the “Brake Warning Light” is on. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. (Continued) (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. Manual Transmission — If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be Transmission fluid is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addichanged immediately. tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If Equipped transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to CAUTION! ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this the chemicals can damage your transmission composection for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain nents. Such damage is not covered by the New the transmission fluid at the correct level using the Vehicle Limited Warranty. recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should Fluid Level Check be used. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Special Additives Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the The manufacturer strongly recommends against using transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can any special additives in the transmission. check your transmission fluid level using special service MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION! Maintenance Schedule. In addition, change the fluid if it becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Automatic Transmission — Aisin F21-250 HD Transmission — If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the Fluid Changes recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the be used. life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the fluid as indicated in the If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Special Additives Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions. any special additives in the transmission. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered check your transmission fluid level using special service product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfuncmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addition, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have tives to the transmission. The only exception to this the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vepolicy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission damage. adversely affect seals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® The most common causes are: Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. What Causes Corrosion? • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 CAUTION! (Continued) • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If the engine compartment is washed with an high pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches (20 centimeters) from filler surface. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. Special Care • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as a month. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and Wheel And Wheel Trim Care open. • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. considered the responsibility of the owner. 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detera fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not protectants on Stain Repel products. required to maintain the original condition. Interior Care Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To directly on the mirror. remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folInstrument Panel Cover lowed by rinsing. The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. protectants or other products which may cause undesirGlass Surfaces able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis low glare surface. Cleaning Headlights with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. 7 WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt (Continued) 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 The ID number of the electrical component correspondThe Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. Underhood Fuses 7 Front Distribution Unit 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F14 F15 F16 F17 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 30 Amp Green 50 Amp Red 40 Amp Orange – – – – – – – Mini Fuse – – – – – – – – 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 7.5 Amp Brown 10 Amp Red Description Body Controller Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Transmission Horn Powertrain Power Outlet 115V Transmission Transmission Powertrain Powertrain MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Cavity F18 F19 F20 F21 F23 F24 F30 F81 F82 F83 F84 F85 F86 F88 Maxi Fuse – – – – – – – 70 Amp Tan 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange – Mini Fuse 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 30 Amp Green 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan – – – 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 7.5 Amp Brown Description Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Rear Defroster Fuel Pump Anti-Lock Brake Valves Stability Control System After Run Pump PTC (Secondary) Transmission PTC (Primary) Transmission Front Power Outlet 12V Rear Power Outlet 12V Heated Mirrors 7 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Interior Fuses Rear Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under in the rear compartment. the instrument panel. Rear Fuse Panel Interior Fuse Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery. • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Sun Visors Courtesy Lamp Glove Compartment Rear Courtesy Lamp Bulb Number C5W C5W W5W C5W C5W Exterior Bulbs Front Front Front Front Low and High Beam Headlamp Turn Signal Lamps Parking/Daytime Running Lamps Side Marker Lamps Bulb Number HIR2LL WY21W W21/5W LED (See Authorized dealer) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Rear Tail/Stop Lamps Rear Tail Lamp Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Front Fog Lamps Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped License Plate Lamps Bulb Number P21/5W LED (See Authorized dealer) P21W W16W LED (See Authorized dealer) LED (See Authorized dealer) H11 W16W W5W NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the headlamp housing by turning it counter-clockwise . Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 7 Bulb Removal Procedure Electrical Connector Removal 3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with 5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in the openings in the metal holder. place. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE New Bulb Installation 6. Reinstall the plastic cap. Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps 4. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove. 4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock in place. To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. 1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in Front, Rear Roof Lamps wheel liner. 1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly. 2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner. 2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise. 3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp 3. Remove bulb and replace as needed. housing. 5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket 5. Reinstall lamp. clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the wheel liner. 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Open the liftgate. This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for replacement. 2. Remove the tail lamp access panel. 3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to the body of the vehicle. 4. Remove the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to the tail lamp housing. 6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing. 7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise. 8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4L Turbo Engine Cooling System 1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula). U.S. 13.1 Gallons Metric 50 Liters 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters 6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters 7 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-90032. We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) 7 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Euro Twin Clutch Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – Aisin F21-250 HD Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid Gear Oil: Use only MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Control system: Use only MOPAR® C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle indicator system. The oil change indicator system will Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Instrument Panel” for further information. scheduled maintenance. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluswhichever comes first. ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer Severe Duty All Models tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Reis operated in a dusty and off road environment. This quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditype of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 • Check engine oil level. miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check windshield washer fluid level. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights. Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Check and adjust hand brake. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 Maintenance Chart X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Replace cabin air filter. Replace Brake Fluid every two years Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Replace spark plugs. ** 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 Change the transmission fluid (manual, or Euro Twin Clutch) if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), offroad, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X X X 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Replace the timing belt. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X 8 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 9 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1-888-242-6342 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT Canada Customer Center They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who 9 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related have any questions about the service contract, call the concerns. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in WARRANTY INFORMATION individual problems between you, your authorized See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the dealer, and the manufacturer. DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), market. or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. 9 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE You can also obtain other information about motor Service Manuals vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in In Canada diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you ing, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles should contact the Customer Service Department immedivehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect system, and/or components is written in straightforward to the Canadian government should contact Transport language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ Diagnostic Procedure Manuals PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. • Call toll free at: DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Treadwear Or The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com 9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades habits, service practices, and differences in road characThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, teristics and climate. representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under Traction Grades controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repreWARNING! sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law. straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 420 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Air Bag Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .352 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 INDEX 421 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .397 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 10 422 INDEX Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .172 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .75 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .74 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .68 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .64 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .187 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 INDEX 423 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 .367 .365 .369 .365 .369 .368 .368 .366 .377 .167 .150 .410 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .147 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .123 10 424 INDEX Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .134 Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 INDEX 425 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .398 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Adding . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . Clean Air . . . . . . . . . Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . Filler Door (Gas Cap) Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . Light . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 .300 .397 .299 .169 .169 .299 .169 .169 .300 .299 .299 .397 .302 .384 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 10 426 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Hazard Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Select Lever Override General Information . . . . . General Maintenance. . . . . Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . INDEX 427 .328 Lighter, Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 .325 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 .324 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 .332 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .172 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Jacking Instructions . Jack Location . . . . . Jack Operation . . . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 428 INDEX Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 .353 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 .175 .349 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 .402 .172 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .172 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .167 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Locks Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX 429 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 .175 .175 .180 .180 .350 .397 .351 .350 .352 .352 .352 .352 .351 .351 .352 .348 .136 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .274 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 10 430 INDEX Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Seat Belt Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .43 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .43 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .188 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 INDEX 431 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Seats Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .172 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Service Reminder Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 10 432 INDEX Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Steering Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .188 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .44 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .273 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .293 INDEX 433 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 .415 .281 .289 .292 .266 .268 .283 .287 .287 .266 .314 .305 .340 .306 .306 .251 .260 .305 Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Euro Twin Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .136 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 .209 .415 .187 .136 10 434 INDEX Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .15 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Wait to Start Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .167 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Wrench (Service Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. Chrysler Group LLC 15BF-126-AB 15BEV24-126-AA Second Edition First Edition Printed Printedin inU.S.A. U.S.A.